update to current texinfo.tex

2 files changed, 3794 insertions, 2912 deletions

diff --git a/man/ChangeLog b/man/ChangeLog
index 115cfe74b11..abe32a31868 100644
--- a/man/ChangeLog
+++ b/man/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+2006-04-02  Karl Berry  <karl@gnu.org>
+
+        * texinfo.tex: update to current version (2006-03-21.13).
+
 2006-04-02  Bill Wohler  <wohler@newt.com>
 
         * mh-e.texi (Getting Started, Junk, Bug Reports)
diff --git a/man/texinfo.tex b/man/texinfo.tex
index 80a6d085f5d..7ed20f016b1 100644
--- a/man/texinfo.tex
+++ b/man/texinfo.tex
@@ -3,11 +3,11 @@
 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
 %
-\def\texinfoversion{2006-02-05.23}
+\def\texinfoversion{2006-03-21.13}
 %
-% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994,
-%   1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004,
-%   2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free
+% Software Foundation, Inc.
 %
 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
@@ -24,25 +24,18 @@
 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
 % Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
 %
-% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
-% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
-% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
 %
 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
-%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
-%     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
-%   ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
 %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
-%   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
-%
-% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
 %
-% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
-% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
-%
 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
 % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
@@ -59,8 +52,12 @@
 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
 %
-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
-% the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+
 
 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
 
@@ -70,7 +67,14 @@
 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
 
-% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
 \let\ptexb=\b
 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
 \let\ptexc=\c
@@ -80,23 +84,35 @@
 \let\ptexend=\end
 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
 \let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
 \let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
 \let\ptexstar=\*
 \let\ptext=\t
 
-% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
-\let\+ = \relax
-
-\message{Basics,}
-\chardef\other=12
-
 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
 % starts a new line in the output.
 \newlinechar = `^^J
 
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
@@ -135,44 +151,97 @@
 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
+\chardef\spacecat = 10
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
 
 % Ignore a token.
 %
 \def\gobble#1{}
 
-\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
-\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
-\hyphenation{eshell}
-\hyphenation{white-space}
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+  spell-ing spell-ings
+  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+  wide-spread wrap-around
+}
 
 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen \bindingoffset
-\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
 
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
 %
 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
-\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
-   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
-   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
-   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
-}%
-\else
-\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
-   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
-   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
-   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
-   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
-   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+\def\loggingall{%
+  \tracingstats2
+  \tracingpages1
+  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
+  \tracingparagraphs1
+  \tracingoutput1
+  \tracingmacros2
+  \tracingrestores1
+  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+    \tracingscantokens1
+    \tracingifs1
+    \tracinggroups1
+    \tracingnesting2
+    \tracingassigns1
+  \fi
+  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
+  \errorcontextlines16
 }%
-\fi
 
 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
@@ -223,13 +292,17 @@
     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
     % before the \shipout runs.
     %
-    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
-                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
+               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
+               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
+               % it needs to be 
+               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
     \shipout\vbox{%
       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
-      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
       %
       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
         \hsize = \outerhsize
@@ -277,7 +350,7 @@
       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
       \fi
     }% end of \shipout\vbox
-  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  }% end of group with \indexdummies
   \advancepageno
   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
 }
@@ -310,143 +383,161 @@
 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
 %
-\def\parsearg#1{%
-  \let\next = #1%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+  \def\argtorun{#2}%
   \begingroup
     \obeylines
-    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
-}
-
-% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
-% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
-\def\parseargx{%
-  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
-  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
-    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
-  \else
-    \expandafter\parseargline
-  \fi
+    \spaceisspace
+    #1%
+    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
 }
 
-% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
-{\obeyspaces %
- \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
-
 {\obeylines %
   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
-    %
-    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
-    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
-    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
-    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
-    %
-    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
-    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
   }%
 }
 
-% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
-% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
-% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
-% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
 
-% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
 %    @end itemize  @c foo
-% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
-% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
-% result to \toks0.
-%
-% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
-% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
-% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
-% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
-% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
-% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
-% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
-%
-\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \ignoreactivespaces
-    \edef\temp{#1}%
-    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
-  \endgroup
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+  \def\temp{#3}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty
+    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
+    \let\temp\finishparsearg
+  \else
+    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+  \fi
+  % Put the space token in:
+  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
 }
 
-% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
+% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
 %
-\begingroup
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
+
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+%       is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+%
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
+
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+  \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
   \obeyspaces
-  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
-\endgroup
+  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+  % should produce a line of output anyway.
+  %
+  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
 
 
 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
 
-%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
-%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
-\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
-\def\ENVcheck{%
-\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
-\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
+%
+%   \envdef\foo{...}
+%   \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
 
-% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 
-\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+% At runtime, environments start with this:
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
 
-\def\beginxxx #1{%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
-{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
-\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
 
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-%
-\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
-\def\endxxx #1{%
-  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
-  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
-  %
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
-      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
-      \errhelp = \EMsimple
-      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
-    \else
-      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
-    \fi
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
   \else
-    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
-    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+    \badenverr
   \fi
 }
 
-% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
-%
-\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
+\def\badenverr{%
   \errhelp = \EMsimple
-  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+}
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+  \ifx#1\empty
+    out of any environment%
+  \else
+    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+  \fi
 }
 
-% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
 %
-\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
-  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+  \else
+    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
+    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+    \csname E#1\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
 }
 
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 
-% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
-% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
-\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
-\def\singlespace{%
-  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
-  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
-  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
-  %\kern \baselineskip}%
-  \setleading\singlespaceskip
-}
 
 %% Simple single-character @ commands
 
@@ -467,16 +558,22 @@
 \let\{=\mylbrace
 \let\}=\myrbrace
 \begingroup
-  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
-  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
-  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
-  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
-  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
-@endgroup
+  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
 
 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
 \let\, = \c
 \let\dotaccent = \.
 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
@@ -484,10 +581,12 @@
 \let\ubaraccent = \b
 \let\udotaccent = \d
 
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
 \def\questiondown{?`}
 \def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
 
 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
 \def\imacro{i}
@@ -500,6 +599,25 @@
   \fi\fi
 }
 
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+  L\kern-.36em
+  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
+  \kern-.15em
+  \TeX
+}
+
 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
@@ -518,14 +636,32 @@
 % @* forces a line break.
 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
 
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
+
 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
-\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
 
 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
-\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
 
 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
-\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+% 
+\def\onword{on}
+\def\offword{off}
+%
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
 
 % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
@@ -540,47 +676,24 @@
 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
 % the text is small, which looks bad.
 %
-\def\group{\begingroup
-  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
   \fi
+  \startsavinginserts
   %
-  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
-  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
-  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
-  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
-  % above.  But it's pretty close.
-  \def\Egroup{%
-    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
-    \endgroup         % End the \group.
-  }%
-  %
-  \vtop\bgroup
-    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
-    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
-    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
-    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
-    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
-    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
-    \everypar = {\strut}%
-    %
-    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
-    % normal interline spacing.
-    \offinterlineskip
-    %
-    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
-    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
-    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
-    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
-    % empty paragraph.
-    \ifx\par\lisppar
-      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
-      %
-      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
-      \obeylines
-    \fi
-    %
+  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
@@ -590,6 +703,32 @@
     \comment
 }
 %
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above.  But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+  % group, force a page break.
+  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+      \page
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \box\groupbox
+  \prevdepth = \dimen1
+  \checkinserts
+}
+%
 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
 %
@@ -602,10 +741,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
 
-\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
-
 % Old definition--didn't work.
-%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%\parseargdef\need{\par %
 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
@@ -613,7 +750,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
 %}}
 
-\def\needx#1{%
+\parseargdef\need{%
   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
   % paragraph.
   \par
@@ -652,37 +789,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-% @br   forces paragraph break
+% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
 
 \let\br = \par
 
-% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
-% font as three actual period characters.
-%
-\def\dots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \hbox to 1.5em{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
-    .\hss.\hss.%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
-  }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \hbox to 2em{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
-    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
-  }%
-  \spacefactor=3000
-}
-
-
-% @page    forces the start of a new page
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
 %
 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
 
@@ -694,13 +805,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newskip\exdentamount
 
 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
-\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
 
 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
-\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
-\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
 
 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
 % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
@@ -752,37 +861,71 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 
 % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
-% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\include{\begingroup
-  \catcode`\\=12
-  \catcode`~=12
-  \catcode`^=12
-  \catcode`_=12
-  \catcode`|=12
-  \catcode`<=12
-  \catcode`>=12
-  \catcode`+=12
-  \parsearg\includezzz}
-% Restore active chars for included file.
-\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
-  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+  \pushthisfilestack
   \def\thisfile{#1}%
-  \input\thisfile
-\endgroup}
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp
+  \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`~=\other
+  \catcode`^=\other
+  \catcode`_=\other
+  \catcode`|=\other
+  \catcode`<=\other
+  \catcode`>=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other
+  \catcode`-=\other
+}
 
-\def\thisfile{}
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
 
-% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
 
-\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
-\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
-\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-\centerline{#1}}}
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+  \ifhmode
+    \let\next\centerH
+  \else
+    \let\next\centerV
+  \fi
+  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+}
+\def\centerH#1{%
+  {%
+    \hfil\break
+    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+    \line{#1}%
+    \break
+  }%
+}
+\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
 
 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
 
-\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
-\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
 
 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
 % @c is the same as @comment
@@ -797,13 +940,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
-% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
 %
 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
 \def\noneword{none}
 %
-\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
-\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\asisword
   \else
@@ -820,8 +963,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
-\def\doexampleindent#1{%
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\asisword
   \else
@@ -833,33 +975,76 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
+%
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\noneword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+%
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
+%
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+  \gdef\indent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \indent
+  }%
+  \gdef\noindent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \noindent
+  }%
+  \global\everypar = {%
+    \kern -\parindent
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+  }%
+}
+
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+  \global \everypar = {}%
+}
+
+
 % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
 %
 \def\asis#1{#1}
 
 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
-% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
-% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
-% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
-%
-% @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
-% entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
-% @math gets a chance to work.  This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
-% at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
-%
-\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
 %
 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
-% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
-% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
-%
-{\catcode95 = \active  % 95 = _
-\gdef\mathunderscore{%
-  \catcode95=\active
-  \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
-}}
-%
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+    \catcode`\_=\active
+    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+  }
+}
 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
 % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
@@ -870,14 +1055,58 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 \def\math{%
   \tex
-  \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
+  \mathunderscore
   \let\\ = \mathbackslash
-  \implicitmath\finishmath}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
+  \mathactive
+  $\finishmath
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+  \catcode`^ = \active
+  \catcode`< = \active
+  \catcode`> = \active
+  \catcode`+ = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+  }
+}
 
 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
-\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
-\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+\def\minus{$-$}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
+    .\hfil.\hfil.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \dots
+  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
+% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
+% Texinfo's parsing.
+%
+\let\comma = ,
 
 % @refill is a no-op.
 \let\refill=\relax
@@ -893,20 +1122,20 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
 \def\setfilename{%
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
    \iflinks
-     \readauxfile
+     \tryauxfile
+     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
    \openindices
-   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
-   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
    %
    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
-   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
-   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
-   \closein1
-   \temp
+   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+   \closein 1
    %
    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
 }
@@ -942,17 +1171,72 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newif\ifpdf
 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
 
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
+% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
-  \pdffalse
-  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
-  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
-  \let\endlink = \relax
-  \let\linkcolor = \relax
-  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
 \else
-  \pdftrue
-  \pdfoutput = 1
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+  \else
+    \ifcase\pdfoutput
+    \else
+      \pdftrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
+% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
+% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
+% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
+% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's what we do).
+
+% double active backslashes.
+% 
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
+ @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
+   @catcode`@\=@active
+   @let\=@doublebackslash}
+}
+
+% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
+% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
+% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens.  I've
+% tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
+% 
+% #1 is the tokens to replace.
+% #2 is the replacement.
+% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
+% 
+\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
+  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
+    ##1%
+    \ifx\\##2\\%
+    \else
+      #2%
+      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
+        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
+      }%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
+}
+\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
+\def\backslashparens#1{%
+  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
+             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
+  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
+  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
+}
+
+\ifpdf
   \input pdfcolor
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
     \def\imageheight{#3}%
@@ -966,15 +1250,26 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
-         #1.pdf%
+         #1.pdf%
        \else
          {#1.pdf}%
        \fi
     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
     \fi}
-  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
-  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+    \atdummies
+    \activebackslashdouble
+    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
+    \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
+  }}%
+  %
+  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
+  %
   \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
@@ -982,80 +1277,106 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
-    \advance\tempnum by1
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
-  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
-    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-    \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
-      \closein 1
-      \indexnofonts
-      \def\tt{}
-      \let\_ = \normalunderscore
+  %
+  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
+  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+  % #4 is the page number
+  %
+  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
+    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
+      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
+    \else
+      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
+      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
+    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
+    %
+    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+    \begingroup
       % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
       %
-      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
-      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
-      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
-      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
-      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
-      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
-      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
-      \input \jobname.toc
-      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
-      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
-      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
-      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
-      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
-      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
+      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \def\thischapnum{##2}%
+        \def\thissecnum{0}%
+        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+        \def\thissecnum{##2}%
+        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+        \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+      }%
+      \def\thischapnum{0}%
+      \def\thissecnum{0}%
+      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      %
+      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+      % al. a second time, below.
+      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \readdatafile{toc}%
+      %
+      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+      %
+      % We use the node names as the destinations.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+      %
+      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
+      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
+      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+      %
+      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
+      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+      \indexnofonts
+      \setupdatafile
+      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
       \input \jobname.toc
-    \endgroup\fi
-  }}
-  \def\makelinks #1,{%
-    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
-    \ifx\params\E
-      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
-    \else
-      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
-      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
-      \picknum{#1}%
-      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
-        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
-      \linkcolor #1%
-      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
-      \endlink
-    \fi
-    \nextmakelinks
-  }
-  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
-  \def\pn#1{%
-    \def\p{#1}%
-    \ifx\p\lbrace
-      \let\nextpn=\ppn
-    \else
-      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
-      \def\first{#1}
-    \fi
-    \nextpn
+    \endgroup
   }
-  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
-  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
-  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
-  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  %
   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
@@ -1070,21 +1391,28 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \else
     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
   \fi
+  % make a live url in pdf output.
   \def\pdfurl#1{%
     \begingroup
-      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
-      \let\value=\expandablevalue
+      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
+      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
+      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
+      % people have actually reported a problem with.
+      % 
+      \normalturnoffactive
+      \def\@{@}%
+      \let\/=\empty
+      \makevalueexpandable
       \leavevmode\Red
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
-        % #1
     \endgroup}
   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
   \def\maketoks{%
-    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
     \ifx\first0\adn0
     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
@@ -1104,20 +1432,44 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+\else
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\linkcolor = \relax
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
 
 
 \message{fonts,}
-% Font-change commands.
+
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
+}
+
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+%
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
 
 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+% So we set up a \sf.
 \newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
 
-% We don't need math for this one.
-\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
 
 % Default leading.
 \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
@@ -1168,20 +1520,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\scshape{csc}
 \def\scbshape{csc}
 
-\newcount\mainmagstep
-\ifx\bigger\relax
-  % not really supported.
-  \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
-  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
-\else
-  \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
-  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\fi
-% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
-% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
-% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
@@ -1191,12 +1534,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
 
-% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
-\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
 
 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
@@ -1209,6 +1554,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
 
 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
@@ -1220,7 +1566,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
 
-% Fonts for title page:
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
@@ -1232,8 +1579,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\authortt{\sectt}
 
 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
@@ -1246,6 +1595,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
 
 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
@@ -1258,6 +1608,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
 
 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
@@ -1265,11 +1616,22 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
-% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
 
 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
@@ -1284,56 +1646,104 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 
 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
-% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
-% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
-% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
-% redefine \bf itself.
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
 \def\textfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
-  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{text}%
+  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
 \def\titlefonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \def\curfontsize{title}%
+  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
 \def\chapfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
-  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
 \def\secfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
-  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
 \def\subsecfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
-  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+\def\reducedfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
 \def\smallfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{small}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
 \def\smallerfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
-\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
+%
+% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
 
 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
 %
-\textfonts
+\textfonts \rm
 
 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
@@ -1344,27 +1754,41 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % Fonts for short table of contents.
 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
 
 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
 
 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
+                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
+% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 
 \let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
 \let\var=\smartslanted
 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
 \let\emph=\smartitalic
-\let\cite=\smartslanted
 
+% @b, explicit bold.
 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
 \let\strong=\b
 
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
 % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
@@ -1372,11 +1796,35 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
 
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
+    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+\catcode`@=\other
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+
 \def\t#1{%
-  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
   \null
 }
-\let\ttfont=\t
 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 \font\keysy=cmsy9
@@ -1411,13 +1859,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \nohyphenation
     %
     \rawbackslash
-    \frenchspacing
+    \plainfrenchspacing
     #1%
   }%
   \null
 }
 
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
 
@@ -1431,14 +1879,16 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \catcode`\_=\active
   %
   \global\def\code{\begingroup
-    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
-    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \catcode`\-=\active  \catcode`\_=\active
+    \ifallowcodebreaks
+     \let-\codedash
+     \let_\codeunder
+    \else
+     \let-\realdash
+     \let_\realunder
+    \fi
     \codex
   }
-  %
-  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
-  % just treat them as a normal -.
-  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
 }
 
 \def\realdash{-}
@@ -1456,30 +1906,53 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
 
+% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
+% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
+% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
+% 
+\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
+
+\def\keywordtrue{true}
+\def\keywordfalse{false}
+
+\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
+    \allowcodebreakstrue
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
+    \allowcodebreaksfalse
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
 % then @kbd has no effect.
 
 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
 %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
 %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
-\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
-  \def\arg{#1}%
-  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
-  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
   \fi\fi\fi
 }
 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
 \def\wordexample{example}
 \def\wordcode{code}
 
-% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
-% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
-\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+% Default is `distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
 
 \def\xkey{\key}
 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
@@ -1487,8 +1960,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
 
-% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\url=\code
+% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\indicateurl=\code
 \let\env=\code
 \let\command=\code
 
@@ -1520,6 +1993,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
 %
@@ -1561,12 +2038,101 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
 
-% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
-\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+% 
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+}
 
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+% 
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
 
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+% 
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+% font height.
+% 
+% feymr - regular
+% feymo - slanted
+% feybr - bold
+% feybo - bold slanted
+% 
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+% Hmm.
+% 
+% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+% Hope not.
+% 
+% 
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+\def\eurofont{%
+  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
+  % font installed.
+  % 
+  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+  % that to the current nominal size.
+  % 
+  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+  % 
+  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+  %
+  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 
+    % bold:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+  \else 
+    % regular:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+  \fi
+  \thiseurofont
+}
+
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+%
+\def\registeredsymbol{%
+  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+    }$%
+}
+
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
+% so we'll define it if necessary.
+% 
+\ifx\Orb\undefined
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+\fi
+
 
 \message{page headings,}
 
@@ -1585,86 +2151,103 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 
-\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
-\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
 
-\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
-   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
-   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
-   %
-   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
-   %
-   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
-   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
-   %
-   % Now you can print the title using @title.
-   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
-   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
-                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
-                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
-                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
-   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
-   \finishedtitlepagetrue
-   %
-   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
-   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
-   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
-   %
-   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
-   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
-   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
-      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
-   %
-   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
-   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
-   \let\oldpage = \page
-   \def\page{%
+\envdef\titlepage{%
+  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+    \finishedtitlepagetrue
+    %
+    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+    \let\oldpage = \page
+    \def\page{%
       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-         \finishtitlepage
+         \finishtitlepage
       \fi
-      \oldpage
       \let\page = \oldpage
-      \hbox{}}%
-%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+      \page
+      \null
+    }%
 }
 
 \def\Etitlepage{%
-   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-      \finishtitlepage
-   \fi
-   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
-   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
-   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
-   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
-   \oldpage
-   \endgroup
-   %
-   % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
-   % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
-   \HEADINGSon
-   %
-   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
-   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
-     \shortcontents
-     \contents
-     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-     \global\let\contents = \relax
-   \fi
-   %
-   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
-     \contents
-     \global\let\contents = \relax
-     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-   \fi
+    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+        \finishtitlepage
+    \fi
+    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+    \oldpage
+  \endgroup
+  %
+  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+  \HEADINGSon
+  %
+  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+    \shortcontents
+    \contents
+    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+    \global\let\contents = \relax
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+    \contents
+    \global\let\contents = \relax
+    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+  \fi
 }
 
 \def\finishtitlepage{%
-   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
-   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
-   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+  \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
+\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+
+\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+                \let\tt=\authortt}
+
+\parseargdef\title{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
+  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+  \finishedtitlepagefalse
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+}
+
+% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+%
+\parseargdef\author{%
+  \def\temp{\quotation}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+  \else
+    \checkenv\titlepage
+    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
+  \fi
 }
 
+
 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
 
 \let\thispage=\folio
@@ -1674,7 +2257,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
 
-% Now make Tex use those variables
+% Now make TeX use those variables
 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
@@ -1688,32 +2271,27 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
 
-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
 
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
-
-{\catcode`\@=0 %
-
-\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
 
-\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
   %
   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
@@ -1722,9 +2300,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
 }
 
-\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
-%
-}% unbind the catcode of @.
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+
 
 % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
 % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
@@ -1738,7 +2315,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
 
-\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\def\HEADINGSoff{%
 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
 \HEADINGSoff
@@ -1747,7 +2324,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
 % edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
@@ -1759,7 +2336,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
 % page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
@@ -1806,12 +2383,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
 % It generates no output of its own.
 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
-\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
 
 
 \message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
 
 % default indentation of table text
 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
@@ -1823,7 +2399,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
 \newdimen\itemmax
 
-% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
 % these defs.
 % They also define \itemindex
 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
@@ -1835,22 +2411,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
 
-\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-
-\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-
-\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
-                 \itemzzz {#1}}
-
-\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
-                 \itemzzz {#1}}
-
 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
   \itemindex{#1}%
   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
   %
@@ -1874,10 +2438,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
     %
-    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
-    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
-    % \baselineskip glue.
-    \nobreak
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
+    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
+    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
+    % 
+    \penalty 10001
     \endgroup
     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
   \else
@@ -1896,97 +2464,106 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
-\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
-\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
-\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
-\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
-
-% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
-\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
 
 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
-
-\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
-\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
-\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\dontindex #1{}
-\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
-\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
-
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
-\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
-
-\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\begingroup %
-\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
-\let\itemindex=#1%
-\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
-\def\itemfont{#2}%
-\itemmax=\tableindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
-\exdentamount=\tableindent
-\parindent = 0pt
-\parskip = \smallskipamount
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\item = \internalBitem %
-\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
-\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
-\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
-\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
-\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+\envdef\table{%
+  \let\itemindex\gobble
+  \tablecheck{table}%
+}
+\envdef\ftable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{ftable}%
+}
+\envdef\vtable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{vtable}%
+}
+\def\tablecheck#1{%
+  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+    \endgroup
+    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+  \else
+    \let\next\tablex
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\tablex#1{%
+  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+  \parsearg\tabley
+}
+\def\tabley#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp \endtablez
 }
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+  \itemmax=\tableindent
+  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+  \exdentamount=\tableindent
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \parskip = \smallskipamount
+  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \let\item = \internalBitem
+  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+}
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+\let\Eftable\Etable
+\let\Evtable\Etable
+\let\Eitemize\Etable
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable
 
 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
 
 \newcount \itemno
 
-\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
 
-\def\itemizezzz #1{%
-  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
-  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+\def\doitemize#1{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \itemmax=\itemindent
+  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+  \exdentamount=\itemindent
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \parskip=\smallskipamount
+  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+  \let\item=\itemizeitem
 }
 
-\def\itemizey #1#2{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\itemmax=\itemindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
-\exdentamount=\itemindent
-\parindent = 0pt %
-\parskip = \smallskipamount %
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\def\itemcontents{#1}%
-\let\item=\itemizeitem}
-
-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
-% These are `.?!:;,'
-\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
-  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+%
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
+  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+  {%
+   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
+   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
+   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
+   % that's the theory.
+   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+   \noindent
+   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+  \flushcr
+}
 
 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
@@ -1997,11 +2574,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
 % argument is the same as `1'.
 %
-\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
-\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
-  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
-  %
   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
   \def\thearg{#1}%
   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
@@ -2072,13 +2646,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   }%
 }
 
-% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
 % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
 %
 \def\startenumeration#1{%
   \advance\itemno by -1
-  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
 }
 
 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
@@ -2089,16 +2663,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
-
-\def\itemizeitem{%
-\advance\itemno by 1
-{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
-\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
-{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
-\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
-\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
-\flushcr}
 
 % @multitable macros
 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
@@ -2125,24 +2689,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 %   @item ...
 %   using the widest term desired in each column.
-%
-% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
-% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
-% will parse correctly, i.e.,
-%
-%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
-%      template}
-% Not:
-%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
-%      {Column 3 template}
 
 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
 
-% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
-% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+% if they are.
 
 % Sample multitable:
 
@@ -2186,13 +2740,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
 \newif\ifsetpercent
 
-% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
-% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
-% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
-% percent of \hsize for this column.
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
+%
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
   \global\advance\colcount by 1
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
   \setuptable
 }
 
@@ -2209,8 +2762,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
       \else
          \global\advance\colcount by 1
-         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
-                            % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
       \fi
     \fi
@@ -2225,18 +2778,33 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \go
 }
 
-% This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
-% not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
-% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
-% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
-\def\tab{&}
+% multitable-only commands.
+%
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
+% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
+% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
+\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
+%
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
+% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
+% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
+%                                       --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
 
 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
 %
-\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
-\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
+%
+\envdef\multitable{%
   \vskip\parskip
-  \let\item\crcr
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+  \def\item{\crcr}%
+  %
   \tolerance=9500
   \hbadness=9500
   \setmultitablespacing
@@ -2244,81 +2812,93 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \parindent=\multitableparindent
   \overfullrule=0pt
   \global\colcount=0
-  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
   %
+  \everycr = {%
+    \noalign{%
+      \global\everytab={}%
+      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+      \checkinserts
+      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+      %\filbreak
+        % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
+        % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
+        % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    }%
+  }%
+  %
+  \parsearg\domultitable
+}
+\def\domultitable#1{%
   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
   %
-  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
-  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
-  % The table preamble
-  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
-  \everycr{\noalign{%
-  %
-  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
-  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
-  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
-  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
-    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
-  %
   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
-  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
-    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
-  %
-  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
-  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
-  % the first one.
-  %
-  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
-  % to the width of each template entry.
-  %
-  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
-  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
-  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
-  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
-  %
-  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
-  \rightskip=0pt
-  \ifnum\colcount=1
-    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
-    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
-  \else
-    \ifsetpercent \else
-      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
-      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
-      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
-    \fi
-   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
-  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
-  \fi
-  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
-  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
-  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
-  % For example:
-  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
-  % @item @code{#}
-  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
-  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
-  % characters.
-  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
-% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
-% current baselineskip.
+  \halign\bgroup &%
+    \global\advance\colcount by 1
+    \multistrut
+    \vtop{%
+      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+      %
+      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+      % the first one.
+      %
+      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+      % to the width of each template entry.
+      %
+      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+      %
+      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+      \rightskip=0pt
+      \ifnum\colcount=1
+        % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+        \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+      \else
+        \ifsetpercent \else
+          % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+          % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+          \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+        \fi
+       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+      \fi
+      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+      % For example:
+      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+      % @item @code{#}
+      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+      % marking characters.
+      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+    }\cr
+}
+\def\Emultitable{%
+  \crcr
+  \egroup % end the \halign
+  \global\setpercentfalse
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+  %
+  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
+  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
-%% to keep lines equally spaced
-\let\multistrut = \strut
-\else
-%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
-\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
-width0pt\relax} \fi
+\fi
 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
 %% table. If not, do nothing.
 %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
@@ -2335,294 +2915,178 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 
 \message{conditionals,}
-% Prevent errors for section commands.
-% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
-\def\ignoresections{%
-  \let\chapter=\relax
-  \let\unnumbered=\relax
-  \let\top=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
-  \let\section=\relax
-  \let\subsec=\relax
-  \let\subsubsec=\relax
-  \let\subsection=\relax
-  \let\subsubsection=\relax
-  \let\appendix=\relax
-  \let\appendixsec=\relax
-  \let\appendixsection=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
-  \let\contents=\relax
-  \let\smallbook=\relax
-  \let\titlepage=\relax
-}
-
-% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
-% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
-% incorrectly.
-%
-\def\ignoremorecommands{%
-  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
-  \let\defcv = \relax
-  \let\deffn = \relax
-  \let\deffnx = \relax
-  \let\defindex = \relax
-  \let\defivar = \relax
-  \let\defmac = \relax
-  \let\defmethod = \relax
-  \let\defop = \relax
-  \let\defopt = \relax
-  \let\defspec = \relax
-  \let\deftp = \relax
-  \let\deftypefn = \relax
-  \let\deftypefun = \relax
-  \let\deftypeivar = \relax
-  \let\deftypeop = \relax
-  \let\deftypevar = \relax
-  \let\deftypevr = \relax
-  \let\defun = \relax
-  \let\defvar = \relax
-  \let\defvr = \relax
-  \let\ref = \relax
-  \let\xref = \relax
-  \let\printindex = \relax
-  \let\pxref = \relax
-  \let\settitle = \relax
-  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
-  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
-  \let\everyheading = \relax
-  \let\evenheading = \relax
-  \let\oddheading = \relax
-  \let\everyfooting = \relax
-  \let\evenfooting = \relax
-  \let\oddfooting = \relax
-  \let\headings = \relax
-  \let\include = \relax
-  \let\lowersections = \relax
-  \let\down = \relax
-  \let\raisesections = \relax
-  \let\up = \relax
-  \let\set = \relax
-  \let\clear = \relax
-  \let\item = \relax
-}
-
-% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
-% @direntry, and @documentdescription.
+
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+% attempt to close an environment group.
 %
-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\makecond#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+}
+\makecond{iftex}
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+\makecond{ifnothtml}
+\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+\makecond{ifnotxml}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
-\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
-\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
-\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
-
-% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory = \comment
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
 
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
 %
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+\newcount\doignorecount
+
 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
-  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
-  \ignoresections
-  %
-  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
-  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
-  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
-  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+  \obeylines
+  \catcode`\@ = \other
+  \catcode`\{ = \other
+  \catcode`\} = \other
   %
   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
-  \catcode32 = 10
-  %
-  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
-  \catcode`\{ = 9
-  \catcode`\} = 9
+  \spaceisspace
   %
-  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
-  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+  \doignorecount = 0
   %
-  \def\ignoreword{#1}%
-  \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
-    % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
-    % `documentdescription' contains a `c'.  Means not everything will
-    % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
-  \else
-    % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
-    % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
-    %   @c @end ifinfo
-    % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
-    % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
-    \catcode`\c = 14
-  \fi
-  %
-  % And now expand the command defined above.
-  \doignoretext
-}
-
-% What we do to finish off ignored text.
-%
-\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
-
-\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
-\def\obstexwarn{%
-  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
-  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
-  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
-    \immediate\write16{}
-    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
-    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
-    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
-    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
-    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
-    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
-    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
-    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
-    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
-    \immediate\write16{}
-    \global\warnedobstrue
-    \fi
+  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+  \dodoignore{#1}%
 }
 
-% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
-% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
-% uncomment the following line:
-%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
-
-% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
-% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
-%
-\def\nestedignore#1{%
-  \obstexwarn
-  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
-  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
-  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
-  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
-  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+  \obeylines %
   %
-  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
-    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
-    \ignoresections
-    %
-    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
-    % @end command again.
-    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
-    %
-    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
-    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
-    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
-    % undefine them.
-    %
-    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
-    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
-    \ignoremorecommands
-    %
-    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
-    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
-    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
-    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
-    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
-    % stuff compared to the main input.
-    %
-    \nullfont
-    \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
-    \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
-    \let\tensf=\nullfont
-    % Similarly for index fonts.
-    \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
-    \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
-    \let\smallsf=\nullfont
-    % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
-    \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
-    \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
-    \let\smallersf=\nullfont
-    %
-    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
-    \tracinglostchars = 0
+  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
     %
-    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
-    \frenchspacing
+    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
+    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
+      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
     %
-    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
-    \hbadness = 10000
+    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
     %
-    % Do minimal line-breaking.
-    \pretolerance = 10000
-    %
-    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
-    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
-    % Do not execute macro definitions.
-    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
-    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+    % And now expand that command.
+    \doignoretext ^^M%
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty                       % Nothing found.
+    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+  \else                                 % Found a nested condition, ...
+    \advance\doignorecount by 1
+    \let\next\doignoretextyyy           % ..., look for another.
+    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+  \fi
+  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+}
+
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+%
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0      % We have just found the outermost @end.
+    \let\next\enddoignore
+  \else                         % Still inside a nested condition.
+    \advance\doignorecount by -1
+    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
+  \fi
+  \next
 }
 
+% Finish off ignored text.
+{ \obeylines%
+  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
+  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
+  % would result in a blank line in the output.
+  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+}
+
+
 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
 %
 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
-% losing inside @example, for instance.
+% didn't need it.
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
 %
-\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
-  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
-  \parsearg\setxxx}
-\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
-  \def\temp{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
-  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
-  \fi
-  \endgroup
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{#2}%
+    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+    \ifx\temp\empty
+      \next{}%
+    \else
+      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+    \fi
+  }%
 }
-% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
-% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
-% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
-\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
 
 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
 %
-\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
-\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+\parseargdef\clear{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+  }%
+}
 
 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 {
-  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
   %
-  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
-  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
-  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
-  \gdef\value{\begingroup
-    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
-    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
-    \valuexxx}
+  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+    \let\value = \expandablevalue
+    % We don't want these characters active, ...
+    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
+  }
 }
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 
 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
-% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
-% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
-% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
-% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
-% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
-% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
 %
 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
   \else
     \csname SET#1\endcsname
   \fi
@@ -2631,68 +3095,36 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
 % with @set.
 %
-\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
-\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
-    \expandafter\ifsetfail
-  \else
-    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
-  \fi
+% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
+%
+\makecond{ifset}
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+\def\doifset#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
 }
-\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
-\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
 
 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
 %
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
-\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
-    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
-  \else
-    \expandafter\ifclearfail
-  \fi
-}
-\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
-% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
-% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
-%
-\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
-\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
-\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
-\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
-\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
-
-% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
-% @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
-% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
-% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
-% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
-% the @ifset might be nested.)
-%
-\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
-  \edef\temp{%
-    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
-    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
-    %
-    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
-    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
-  }%
-  \temp
-}
-
-% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
-% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
 %
-\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+\makecond{ifclear}
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory=\comment
 
 % @defininfoenclose.
 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
@@ -2702,9 +3134,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % Index generation facilities
 
 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
 
 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
@@ -2785,285 +3216,393 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
 
-% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
-% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
-% laboriously list every single command here.)
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
 %
 \def\indexdummies{%
-\def\ { }%
-\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
-% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
-% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
-% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
-\let\{ = \mylbrace
-\let\} = \myrbrace
-\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
-\normalturnoffactive
-%
-% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
-\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
-\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
-\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
-\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
-\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
-\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
-\def\={\realbackslash =}%
-\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
-\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
-\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
-\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
-\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
-\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
-\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
-% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
-\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
-\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
-\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
-\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
-\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
-\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
-\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
-\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
-\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
-\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
-\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
-%
-% Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
-\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
-\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
-\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
-\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
-%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
-\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
-\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
-\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
-\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
-%
-\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
-\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
-\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
-\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
-\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
-%
-\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
-\def\LaTeX{\realbackslash LaTeX}%
-\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
-\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
-\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
-\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
-\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
-\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
-\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
-\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
-\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
-\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
-\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
-\def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
-\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
-\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
-\def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
-\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
-\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
-\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
-\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
-%
-% These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
-\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
-\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
-\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
-\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
-\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
-\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
-\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
-%
-% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
-% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
-% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
-\let\value = \expandablevalue
-%
-\unsepspaces
-% Turn off macro expansion
-\turnoffmacros
-}
-
-% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
-% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
-% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
-{\obeyspaces
- \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
-
-% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
-% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
-\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
-\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
-\def\indexdummydots{...}
+  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+  \let\{ = \mylbrace
+  \let\} = \myrbrace
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
+% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
+% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
+% this will be simpler.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+  \def\@{@@}%
+  \def\ {@ }%
+  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+  \otherbackslash
+}
 
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
+%
+\def\commondummies{%
+  %
+  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
+  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control% words,
+  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
+  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+  % from whatever follows.
+  %
+  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+  % space.
+  %
+  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+  %
+  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
+  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+  %
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  \definedummyletter\_%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \definedummyword\AA
+  \definedummyword\AE
+  \definedummyword\L
+  \definedummyword\OE
+  \definedummyword\O
+  \definedummyword\aa
+  \definedummyword\ae
+  \definedummyword\l
+  \definedummyword\oe
+  \definedummyword\o
+  \definedummyword\ss
+  \definedummyword\exclamdown
+  \definedummyword\questiondown
+  \definedummyword\ordf
+  \definedummyword\ordm
+  %
+  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+  \definedummyword\bf
+  \definedummyword\gtr
+  \definedummyword\hat
+  \definedummyword\less
+  \definedummyword\sf
+  \definedummyword\sl
+  \definedummyword\tclose
+  \definedummyword\tt
+  %
+  \definedummyword\LaTeX
+  \definedummyword\TeX
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  \definedummyword\bullet
+  \definedummyword\comma
+  \definedummyword\copyright
+  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
+  \definedummyword\dots
+  \definedummyword\enddots
+  \definedummyword\equiv
+  \definedummyword\error
+  \definedummyword\euro
+  \definedummyword\expansion
+  \definedummyword\minus
+  \definedummyword\pounds
+  \definedummyword\point
+  \definedummyword\print
+  \definedummyword\result
+  %
+  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
+  \macrolist
+  %
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  %
+  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+  \makevalueexpandable
+}
+
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+%
+\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
+  % Control letters and accents.
+  \definedummyletter\!%
+  \definedummyaccent\"%
+  \definedummyaccent\'%
+  \definedummyletter\*%
+  \definedummyaccent\,%
+  \definedummyletter\.%
+  \definedummyletter\/%
+  \definedummyletter\:%
+  \definedummyaccent\=%
+  \definedummyletter\?%
+  \definedummyaccent\^%
+  \definedummyaccent\`%
+  \definedummyaccent\~%
+  \definedummyword\u
+  \definedummyword\v
+  \definedummyword\H
+  \definedummyword\dotaccent
+  \definedummyword\ringaccent
+  \definedummyword\tieaccent
+  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
+  \definedummyword\udotaccent
+  \definedummyword\dotless
+  %
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \definedummyword\b
+  \definedummyword\i
+  \definedummyword\r
+  \definedummyword\sc
+  \definedummyword\t
+  %
+  % Commands that take arguments.
+  \definedummyword\acronym
+  \definedummyword\cite
+  \definedummyword\code
+  \definedummyword\command
+  \definedummyword\dfn
+  \definedummyword\emph
+  \definedummyword\env
+  \definedummyword\file
+  \definedummyword\kbd
+  \definedummyword\key
+  \definedummyword\math
+  \definedummyword\option
+  \definedummyword\pxref
+  \definedummyword\ref
+  \definedummyword\samp
+  \definedummyword\strong
+  \definedummyword\tie
+  \definedummyword\uref
+  \definedummyword\url
+  \definedummyword\var
+  \definedummyword\verb
+  \definedummyword\w
+  \definedummyword\xref
+}
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
 \def\indexnofonts{%
-\def\@{@}%
-% how to handle braces?
-\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
-%
-\let\,=\indexdummyfont
-\let\"=\indexdummyfont
-\let\`=\indexdummyfont
-\let\'=\indexdummyfont
-\let\^=\indexdummyfont
-\let\~=\indexdummyfont
-\let\==\indexdummyfont
-\let\b=\indexdummyfont
-\let\c=\indexdummyfont
-\let\d=\indexdummyfont
-\let\u=\indexdummyfont
-\let\v=\indexdummyfont
-\let\H=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
-% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
-\def\AA{AA}%
-\def\AE{AE}%
-\def\L{L}%
-\def\OE{OE}%
-\def\O{O}%
-\def\aa{aa}%
-\def\ae{ae}%
-\def\l{l}%
-\def\oe{oe}%
-\def\o{o}%
-\def\ss{ss}%
-%
-% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
-% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
-% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
-%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
-%
-\let\b=\indexdummyfont
-\let\i=\indexdummyfont
-\let\r=\indexdummyfont
-\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
-\let\t=\indexdummyfont
-%
-\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
-\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
-\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
-\let\code=\indexdummyfont
-\let\command=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dots=\indexdummydots
-\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
-\let\env=\indexdummyfont
-\let\file=\indexdummyfont
-\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
-\let\key=\indexdummyfont
-\let\math=\indexdummyfont
-\let\option=\indexdummyfont
-\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
-\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
-\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
-\let\url=\indexdummyfont
-\let\var=\indexdummyfont
-\let\w=\indexdummyfont
-}
-
-% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
-% We must first make another character (@) an escape
-% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
-
-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
- @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+  % Accent commands should become @asis.
+  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
+  % We can just ignore other control letters.
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
+  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
+  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
+  %
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+  %\let\tt=\asis
+  %
+  \def\ { }%
+  \def\@{@}%
+  % how to handle braces?
+  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \def\AA{AA}%
+  \def\AE{AE}%
+  \def\L{L}%
+  \def\OE{OE}%
+  \def\O{O}%
+  \def\aa{aa}%
+  \def\ae{ae}%
+  \def\l{l}%
+  \def\oe{oe}%
+  \def\o{o}%
+  \def\ss{ss}%
+  \def\exclamdown{!}%
+  \def\questiondown{?}%
+  \def\ordf{a}%
+  \def\ordm{o}%
+  %
+  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+  \def\TeX{TeX}%
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+  \def\bullet{bullet}%
+  \def\comma{,}%
+  \def\copyright{copyright}%
+  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
+  \def\dots{...}%
+  \def\enddots{...}%
+  \def\equiv{==}%
+  \def\error{error}%
+  \def\euro{euro}%
+  \def\expansion{==>}%
+  \def\minus{-}%
+  \def\pounds{pounds}%
+  \def\point{.}%
+  \def\print{-|}%
+  \def\result{=>}%
+  %
+  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
+  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
+  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
+  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
+  % that starts with \.
+  % 
+  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
+  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+  % 
+  \macrolist
+}
 
 \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
 
-% For \ifx comparisons.
-\def\emptymacro{\empty}
-
 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-%
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
 
 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
-% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
 %
 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  \iflinks
+  {%
+    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+    \toks0 = {#2}%
+    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+    %
+    \ifvmode
+      \dosubindsanitize
+    \else
+      \dosubindwrite
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+%
+\def\dosubindwrite{%
   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
-    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
   \fi
-  {%
-    \count255=\lastpenalty
-    {%
-      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
-      \escapechar=`\\
-      {%
-        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
-        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
-        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
-        %
-        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
-        %
-        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
-        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
-          \let\subentry = \empty
-        \else
-          \def\subentry{ #3}%
-        \fi
-        %
-        % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
-        % off to get the string to sort by.
-        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
-        %
-        % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
-        \toks0 = {#2}%
-        %
-        % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
-        % line to write.
-        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
-          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
-        \fi
-        %
-        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
-        % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
-        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
-        % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
-        % sorted result.
-        \edef\temp{%
-          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
-            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
-        }%
-        %
-        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
-        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
-        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
-        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
-        % like this:
-        % @end defun
-        % @tindex whatever
-        % @defun ...
-        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
-        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
-        % the previous defun.
-        %
-        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
-        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
-        %
-        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
-        %
-        \iflinks
-          \ifvmode
-            \skip0 = \lastskip
-            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
-          \fi
-          %
-          \temp % do the write
-          %
-          %
-          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
-        \fi
-      }%
-    }%
-    \penalty\count255
+  %
+  % Remember, we are within a group.
+  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+  %
+  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+  % get the string to sort by.
+  {\indexnofonts
+   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+  % sorted result.
+  \edef\temp{%
+    \write\writeto{%
+      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
   }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
+%
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+% like this:
+% @end defun
+% @tindex whatever
+% @defun ...
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+% the previous defun.
+%
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+%
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+%
+% But wait, there is a catch there:
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
+% representation of the skip.
+%
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+%
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
+%
+% ..., ready, GO:
+%
+\def\dosubindsanitize{%
+  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+  \skip0 = \lastskip
+  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+  \count255 = \lastpenalty
+  %
+  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+  \else
+    \vskip-\skip0
+  \fi
+  %
+  \dosubindwrite
+  %
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
+    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
+    % 
+    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
+    %   @vindex index-whatever
+    %   Description.
+    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+    % and the "Description." paragraph.
+    \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
+  \else
+    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
+  \fi
 }
 
 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
@@ -3101,13 +3640,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
 %
-\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
-\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
   %
   \smallfonts \rm
   \tolerance = 9500
-  \indexbreaks
+  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
   %
   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
@@ -3134,7 +3672,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
       % to make right now.
-      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
       \catcode`\\ = 0
       \escapechar = `\\
       \begindoublecolumns
@@ -3156,7 +3694,10 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \removelastskip
   %
   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
-  \penalty -300
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
+  \penalty 0
+  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
   %
   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
@@ -3166,80 +3707,100 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
-  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
-  %
   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
   \nobreak
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
 }}
 
-% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
-% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
-% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
+% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
 %
-\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
-  %
-  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
-  % affect previous text.
-  \par
-  %
-  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
-  \parfillskip = 0in
-  %
-  % No extra space above this paragraph.
-  \parskip = 0in
-  %
-  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
-  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
-  %
-  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
-  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
-  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
-  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
-  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
-  %
-  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
-  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
-  \hangindent = 2em
-  %
-  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
-  % with blank space.
-  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
-  %
-  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
-  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
-  %
-  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
-  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
-  \noindent
-  %
-  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
-  #1%
-  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
-  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
-  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
-  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
-  \def\tempb{#2}%
-  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
-  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
-  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
+%       \def\entry#1#2{...
+% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
+% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
+% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
+%
+% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
+%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
+\def\entry{%
+  \begingroup
+    %
+    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+    % affect previous text.
+    \par
+    %
+    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+    \parfillskip = 0in
+    %
+    % No extra space above this paragraph.
+    \parskip = 0in
+    %
+    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
     %
-    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
-    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
-    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
-    \hfil\penalty50
-    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
     %
-    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
-    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
-    % \hbox ensues.
-    \ifpdf
-      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+    \hangindent = 2em
+    %
+    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+    % with blank space.
+    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+    %
+    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
+    % columns.
+    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+    %
+    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+    \afterassignment\doentry
+    \let\temp =
+}
+\def\doentry{%
+    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+      \noindent
+      \aftergroup\finishentry
+      % And now comes the text of the entry.
+}
+\def\finishentry#1{%
+    % #1 is the page number.
+    %
+    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+    \def\tempb{#1}%
+    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+    \ifx\tempc\tempd
+      \ %
     \else
-      \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+      %
+      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+      \hfil\penalty50
+      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+      %
+      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+      % \hbox ensues.
+      \ifpdf
+        \pdfgettoks#1.%
+        \ \the\toksA
+      \else
+        \ #1%
+      \fi
     \fi
-  \fi%
-  \par
-\endgroup}
+    \par
+  \endgroup
+}
 
 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
@@ -3408,6 +3969,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \message{sectioning,}
 % Chapters, sections, etc.
 
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
+% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
 \newcount\chapno
 \newcount\secno        \secno=0
 \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
@@ -3415,9 +3982,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
 \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+%
 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+%
 \def\appendixletter{%
   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
@@ -3455,11 +4025,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
 % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
 \def\thischapter{}
 \def\thissection{}
 
 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
 
 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
@@ -3469,288 +4040,246 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
 
-% Choose a numbered-heading macro
-% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
-% #2 is text for heading
-\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
-  \chapterzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \seczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
-  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
-    \chapterzzz{#2}
+% we only have subsub.
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+%
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
+%
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+\def\chapheadtype{N}
+
+% Choose a heading macro
+% #1 is heading type
+% #2 is heading level
+% #3 is text for heading
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+  \absseclevel=#2
+  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+    \absseclevel = 0
   \else
-    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+      \absseclevel = 3
+    \fi
   \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
-\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
-  \appendixzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
-  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
-    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  % The heading type:
+  \def\headtype{#1}%
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
+      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Check for appendix sections:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+    \else
+      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+        \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+      \fi\fi
+    \fi
+    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
+      \def\headtype{U}%
+    \else
+      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  % Now print the heading:
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifcase\absseclevel
+        \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \fi
   \else
-    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+    \if \headtype A%
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+          \appendixzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+          \chapterzzz{#3}%
+      \or \seczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
   \fi
-\fi
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
 }
 
-% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
-\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
-  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
-  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
-    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
-  \else
-    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-  \fi
-\fi
+% an interface:
+\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+%
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+%
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+  % as an @include file.
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\chapno by 1
+  %
+  % Used for \float.
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % Write the actual heading.
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+  \message{\appendixnum}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
 }
 
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
-\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
-\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
-\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
-\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
-% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
-\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
-\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-\global\advance \appendixno by 1
-\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
-\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
-                       {\appendixletter}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\global\let\section = \appendixsec
-\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+  %
+  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+  % to be executed, not expanded).
+  %
+  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+  % the toc entries.)
+  \toks0 = {#1}%
+  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
 }
 
 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
-\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
+  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
+  % Thus we are safer this way:         --kasal, 24feb04
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+  \unnmhead0{#1}%
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+}
 
 % @top is like @unnumbered.
-\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-
-\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-%
-% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
-% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
-% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
-% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
-% to be executed, not expanded).
-%
-% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
-% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
-% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
-% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
-% the toc entries.)
-\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
-%
-\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
-\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
-}
+\let\top\unnumbered
 
 % Sections.
-\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
-\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz #1{%
-\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
-\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
-\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
-  {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+}
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
 }
 
 % Subsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
-\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
-\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
-\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
-  {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
 }
 
 % Subsubsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
-\subsubsecheading {#1}
-  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
-\subsubsecheading {#1}
-  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
-  {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
-% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
-\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
-\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
-\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
 
 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+\let\section = \numberedsec
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 
 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
 
@@ -3763,23 +4292,27 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
 
 
-\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
-\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
-{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
-{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+\def\majorheading{%
+  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+}
 
-\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
-{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
+  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
 
 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
-\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
-\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
 
 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
@@ -3788,8 +4321,6 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
 
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-
 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
 
@@ -3812,7 +4343,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
 
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
@@ -3820,107 +4351,201 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 \CHAPPAGon
 
-\def\CHAPFplain{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
-
-% Plain chapter opening.
-% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
-\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+% Chapter opening.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+%
+% To test against our argument.
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+%
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
   \pchapsepmacro
   {%
     \chapfonts \rm
-    \def\chapnum{#2}%
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
+    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
+    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+    \def\temptype{#2}%
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+      \gdef\thischapter{#1}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+      \gdef\thischapter{}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
+      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
+      %
+      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
+                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{numchap}%
+      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
+                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
+    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+    %
+    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+    \donoderef{#2}%
+    %
+    % Typeset the actual heading.
     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
   }%
   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
   \nobreak
 }
 
-% Plain opening for unnumbered.
-\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
-
 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
-  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
-    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
-    \leftskip = \rightskip
-    \parfillskip = 0pt
-  }%
-  \chfplain{#1}{}%
-}}
+\def\centerparameters{%
+  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+  \leftskip = \rightskip
+  \parfillskip = 0pt
+}
 
-\CHAPFplain % The default
 
+% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
+% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
+%
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+%
 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 }
-
 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
 \par\penalty 5000 %
 }
-
 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                        \parindent=0pt
                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 }
-
-\def\CHAPFopen{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+\def\CHAPFopen{%
+  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 
 
-% Section titles.
+% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+%
 \newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
-\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
-\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
 
 % Subsection titles.
-\newskip \subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
-\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
 
 % Subsubsection titles.
-\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
-\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
-\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
 
 
-% Print any size section title.
+% Print any size, any type, section title.
 %
-% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
-% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
-  {%
-    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
-    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
-  }%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
+% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
+% section number.
+%
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
   {%
     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
-    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Insert space above the heading.
+    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
     %
-    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
-    \def\secnum{#2}%
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+    \def\temptype{#3}%
     %
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unn}%
+      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+      % and don't redefine \thissection.
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{num}%
+      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+    %
+    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
+    \donoderef{#3}%
+    %
+    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
+    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
+    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
+    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
+    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
+    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
+    \nobreak
+    %
+    % Output the actual section heading.
     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
-          \unhbox0 #3}%
+          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #1}%
   }%
-  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+  % Don't allow stretch, though.
+  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+  %
+  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+  % was followed by glue.
+  \nobreak
+  %
+  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+  % discardable item.)
+  \vskip-\parskip
+  % 
+  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
+  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
+  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
+  % 
+  %   @section sec-whatever
+  %   @deffn def-whatever
+  \penalty 10001
 }
 
 
@@ -3929,112 +4554,173 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \newwrite\tocfile
 
 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
-% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.
+%
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+% destination to jump to.
 %
-% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
-% fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
 %
 \newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\writetocentry#1{%
-  \iftocfileopened\else
-    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
-    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+%
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+    \iftocfileopened\else
+      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+    \fi
+    %
+    \iflinks
+      {\atdummies
+       \edef\temp{%
+         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+       \temp
+      }%
+    \fi
   \fi
-  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
   %
-  % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
-  % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
-  % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
-  % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
-  % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
-  % two named `2'.
-  \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
+  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+  % `1', and two named `2'.
+  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+
+% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
+% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
+% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
+% 
+\def\activecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\"=\active
+  \catcode`\$=\active
+  \catcode`\<=\active
+  \catcode`\>=\active
+  \catcode`\\=\active
+  \catcode`\^=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  \catcode`\|=\active
+  \catcode`\~=\active
+}
+
+
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+\def\readtocfile{%
+  \setupdatafile
+  \activecatcodes
+  \input \jobname.toc
 }
 
 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
 \newcount\savepageno
 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
 
-% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
-% to \tocfile.
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
 %
 \def\startcontents#1{%
-   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
-   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
-   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
-   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
-   \contentsalignmacro
-   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
-   %
-   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
-   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
-   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
-   \savepageno = \pageno
-   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
-      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
-      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
-      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
-      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
-      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
-      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
-      %
-      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
-      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+  \contentsalignmacro
+  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+  %
+  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+  \def\thischapter{}%
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+  %
+  \savepageno = \pageno
+  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+    %
+    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
 }
 
 
 % Normal (long) toc.
 \def\contents{%
-   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
-     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-     \ifeof 1 \else
-       \closein 1
-       \input \jobname.toc
-     \fi
-     \vfill \eject
-     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-     \pdfmakeoutlines
-   \endgroup
-   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-   \pageno = \savepageno
+  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \readtocfile
+    \fi
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \pdfmakeoutlines
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
 }
 
 % And just the chapters.
 \def\summarycontents{%
-   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
-      %
-      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
-      \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
-      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
-      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
-      \secfonts
-      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
-      \rm
-      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
-      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
-      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
-      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
-      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
-      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
-      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
-      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
-      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-      \ifeof 1 \else
-        \closein 1
-        \input \jobname.toc
-      \fi
-     \vfill \eject
-     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-   \endgroup
-   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-   \pageno = \savepageno
+  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+    %
+    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+    \secfonts
+    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+    \rm
+    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \readtocfile
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
 }
 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
 
-\ifpdf
-  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
-\fi
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  %
+  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
+  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+  % there are before deciding ...
+  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
 
 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
@@ -4042,57 +4728,46 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
 
 % Chapters, in the main contents.
-\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
 %
 % Chapters, in the short toc.
 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
-  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
 }
 
 % Appendices, in the main contents.
-\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
-%
-% Appendices, in the short toc.
-\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
-
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
-% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
-% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
 %
-\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
 %
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
-  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
-  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
-  % But use \hss just in case.
-  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
-  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
-  \dimen0 = 1em
-  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
-}
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
 
 % Unnumbered chapters.
-\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
-\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
 
 % Sections.
-\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % Subsections.
-\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
-\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % And subsubsections.
-\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
-  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
-\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
 
 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
 % page number.
@@ -4123,17 +4798,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 \endgroup}
 
-% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
-% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
-% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
-% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
-\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
-  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
-  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
-  % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
-  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
-  \entry{#1}{#2}%
-\endgroup}
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
 
 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
@@ -4143,8 +4809,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
-\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
 
 
 \message{environments,}
@@ -4171,10 +4837,10 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
 %
-\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
-   \vbox{
+   \vbox{%
       \hrule height\dimen2
       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
@@ -4188,17 +4854,16 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
 
-\def\tex{\begingroup
+\envdef\tex{%
   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
-  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
   \catcode `\%=14
-  \catcode 43=12 % plus
-  \catcode`\"=12
-  \catcode`\==12
-  \catcode`\|=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode `\+=\other
+  \catcode `\"=\other
+  \catcode `\|=\other
+  \catcode `\<=\other
+  \catcode `\>=\other
   \escapechar=`\\
   %
   \let\b=\ptexb
@@ -4210,19 +4875,24 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
   \let\!=\ptexexclam
   \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
   \let\+=\tabalign
   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\/=\ptexslash
   \let\*=\ptexstar
   \let\t=\ptext
+  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
   %
   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
   \def\@{@}%
-\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+}
+% There is no need to define \Etex.
 
 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
-% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
 
 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
@@ -4233,34 +4903,25 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % have any width.
 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
 
-% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
-% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
-% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
-% should produce a line of output anyway.
-%
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
-
-% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
-% for use in \parsearg.
-{\sepspaces%
-\global\let\obeyedspace= }
-
 % This space is always present above and below environments.
 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
 
 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
 %
 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
-  \ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
     \endgraf
     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
       \removelastskip
-      \penalty-50
+      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+      % or better ...
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
       \vskip\envskipamount
     \fi
   \fi
@@ -4268,7 +4929,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
 
-% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
+% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
 
 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
@@ -4292,181 +4954,187 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %
 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
 
-\long\def\cartouche{%
-\begingroup
-        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
-        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
-        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
-                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
-        \cartouter=\hsize
-        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
-%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
-%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
-        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
-        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
-        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
-        \vbox\bgroup
-                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
-                \carttop
-                \hbox\bgroup
-                        \hskip\lskip
-                        \vrule\kern3pt
-                        \vbox\bgroup
-                                \hsize=\cartinner
-                                \kern3pt
-                                \begingroup
-                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
-                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
-                                        \parskip=\normpskip
-                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\envdef\cartouche{%
+  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+  \startsavinginserts
+  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+  \cartouter=\hsize
+  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt  % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+                                % side, and for 6pt waste from
+                                % each corner char, and rule thickness
+  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \vbox\bgroup
+      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+      \carttop
+      \hbox\bgroup
+          \hskip\lskip
+          \vrule\kern3pt
+          \vbox\bgroup
+              \kern3pt
+              \hsize=\cartinner
+              \baselineskip=\normbskip
+              \lineskip=\normlskip
+              \parskip=\normpskip
+              \vskip -\parskip
+              \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
+}
 \def\Ecartouche{%
-                                \endgroup
-                                \kern3pt
-                        \egroup
-                        \kern3pt\vrule
-                        \hskip\rskip
-                \egroup
-                \cartbot
-        \egroup
-\endgroup
-}}
+              \ifhmode\par\fi
+              \kern3pt
+          \egroup
+          \kern3pt\vrule
+          \hskip\rskip
+      \egroup
+      \cartbot
+  \egroup
+  \checkinserts
+}
 
 
 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
 % inside a group.
 \def\nonfillstart{%
   \aboveenvbreak
-  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
-  \singlespace
   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
   \parskip = 0pt
   \parindent = 0pt
   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
-  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
-  % at next level down.
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
-    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
-    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \else
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   \fi
+  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
 }
 
-% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
-% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+% This affects the following displayed environments:
+%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
 %
-% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
-% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
-% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
-% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
-% the environment.
-%
-\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+\def\smallword{small}
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
+\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+  \else
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
 
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
-\def\lisp{\begingroup
-  \nonfillstart
-  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
-  \tt
-  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
-  \gobble       % eat return
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+% Let's do it by one command:
+\def\makedispenv #1#2{
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
 }
 
-% @example: Same as @lisp.
-\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+% Define two synonyms:
+\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
+  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
+  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
+}
 
-% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
-% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
-% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
-% whatever) command.
-%
-% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
-% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
 %
-\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
-\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
-\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-
-% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
-  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \smallexamplefonts
-  \lisp
+%
+\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
 }
 
-% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
 %
-\def\display{\begingroup
+\makedispenv {display}{%
   \nonfillstart
-  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
   \gobble
 }
-%
-% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
-%
-\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
-  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \smallexamplefonts \rm
-  \display
-}
 
-% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
 %
-\def\format{\begingroup
-  \let\nonarrowing = t
+\makedispenv{format}{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
   \nonfillstart
-  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
   \gobble
 }
-%
-% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
-%
-\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
-  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \smallexamplefonts \rm
-  \format
-}
 
-% @flushleft (same as @format).
-%
-\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+\envdef\flushleft{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
 
 % @flushright.
 %
-\def\flushright{\begingroup
-  \let\nonarrowing = t
+\envdef\flushright{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
   \nonfillstart
-  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
   \gobble
 }
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
 
 
 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins.
+% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
 %
-\def\quotation{%
-  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+\envdef\quotation{%
   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
-  \singlespace
   \parindent=0pt
-  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
-  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
-  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
   %
   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+  \else
     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   \fi
+  \parsearg\quotationlabel
+}
+
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+% doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Equotation{%
+  \par
+  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
+    % indent a bit.
+    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+  \fi
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    {\bf #1: }%
+  \fi
 }
 
 
@@ -4477,14 +5145,18 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %
 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
 %
-% [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
 \def\dospecials{%
-  \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
-  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
+  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+}
 %
 % [Knuth] p. 380
 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
-  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
 %
 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
@@ -4532,6 +5204,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   }
 \endgroup
 \def\setupverbatim{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
   % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
   \tt
   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
@@ -4553,7 +5227,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %
 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
 \begingroup
-  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
 \endgroup
 %
@@ -4567,609 +5241,393 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %
 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
-% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
 %
 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
-%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
-%% \begingroup
-%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
-%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
-%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
-%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
-%% |endgroup
+%
 \begingroup
   \catcode`\ =\active
-  \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
+  \obeylines %
+  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
+  % line in the output.
+  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
 \endgroup
 %
-\def\verbatim{%
-  \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \begingroup
-    \nonfillstart
-    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-    \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
 }
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+
 
 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
 %
-% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\verbatiminclude{%
-  \begingroup
-    \catcode`\\=12
-    \catcode`~=12
-    \catcode`^=12
-    \catcode`_=12
-    \catcode`|=12
-    \catcode`<=12
-    \catcode`>=12
-    \catcode`+=12
-    \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
-}
-\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
-  \begingroup
-    \nonfillstart
-    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-    \begingroup\setupverbatim
-}
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
 %
 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
-     % Restore active chars for included file.
-  \endgroup
-  \begingroup
-  \def\thisfile{#1}%
-  \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
-  \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \setupverbatim
+    \input #1
+    \afterenvbreak
+  }%
 }
 
 % @copying ... @end copying.
 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
 %
-\newbox\copyingbox
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
 %
-\def\copying{\begingroup
-  \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
-  \def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
-  \global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
-}
-
-% @insertcopying.
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
 %
-\def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
-
+\def\insertcopying{%
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+    \scanexp\copyingtext
+  \endgroup
+}
 
 \message{defuns,}
 % @defun etc.
 
-% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
-\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
-
 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
-\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
 
-\newcount\parencount
-% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
-% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
-\def\activeparens{%
-\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
-\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
-
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-
-{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
-
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
-\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
-
-\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
-\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
-% This is used to turn on special parens
-% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
-\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
-
-% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
-% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
-\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
-  \global\advance\parencount by 1
-}
-%
-% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
-\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-%
-\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
-  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
-  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
-  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
-%
-\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
-} % End of definition inside \activeparens
-%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
-%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
-\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
-\let\ampnr = \&
-\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
-\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
-
-% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
-{
-  \catcode`& = 13
-  \global\let& = \ampnr
-}
-
-% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
-% #1 should be the function name.
-% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
-
-\def\defname #1#2{%
-% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
-% outside the @def...
-\dimen2=\leftskip
-\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
-\noindent
-\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
-\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
-\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
-\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
-% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
-% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
-% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
-{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
-% so that \rightline will obey them.
-\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
-\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
-% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
-\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
-\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
-}
-
-% Common pieces to start any @def...
-% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
-% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
-% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
-%
-\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
-  \begingroup\inENV
-  % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
-  % which is there to keep the function description together with its
-  % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
-  % break after all.
-  \ifnum\lastpenalty = 10000 \penalty0 \fi
-  \medbreak
-  %
-  % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
-  % so that it will exit this group.
-  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+    \medbreak
+  \else
+    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+    % 
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
+    %
+    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+    % But do insert the glue.
+    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+  \fi
   %
   \parindent=0in
   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 }
 
-% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
-%
-\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
-  \catcode61=\active % 61 is `='
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
-  \spacesplit#3%
-}
-
-% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
-% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
-%
-\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
-  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
-}
-
-% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
-% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
-% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
-% #5 is the method's return type.
-%
-\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
-  \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+  \checkenv#1%
+  %
+  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+  % It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
+  %
+  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
 }
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
 
-% Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
-% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
-% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
-% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
-% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
-% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
 %
-\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
-    \def#4{##1}%
-    \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
-  \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    % call \deffnheader:
+    #1#2 \endheader
+    % common ending:
+    \interlinepenalty = 10000
+    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+    \endgraf
+    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
+    \checkparencounts
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-% For @defop.
-\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
-    \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
-  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
-}
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
 
-% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
-% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
-% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
 %
-\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
-  \catcode61=\active %
-  \begingroup\obeylines
-  \spacesplit#3%
-}
-
-% @defopvar.
-\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
-    \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines
-  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
-}
-
-\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines
-  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+  \temp
 }
 
-% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
-% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
-% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
-% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
 %
-% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
-% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
-% won't strip off the braces.
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
 %
-\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
-  \begingroup\obeylines
-  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+  \envdef#1{%
+    \startdefun
+    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+  }%
+  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+  \def#3%
 }
 
-% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
-% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
-%
-\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
-
-% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
-% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
-% (which might be empty) the arguments.
-%
-\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
-  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
-}%
+%%% Untyped functions:
 
-% Split up #2 at the first space token.
-% call #1 with two arguments:
-%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
-%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
-% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
-% and the second is passed as empty.
-%
-{\obeylines
-\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
-\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
-\ifx\relax #3%
-#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
 
-% Define @defun.
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
 
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
-% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
 
-\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
-#1%
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
-\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
 }
 
-\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
-\boldbraxnoamp
-\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-}
+%%% Typed functions:
 
-% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
 
-% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
 
-\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
 
-\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
 }
 
-% @defun == @deffn Function
+%%% Typed variables:
 
-\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
 
-\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
 
-% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
 
-\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
-
-% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
-% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
-\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
-\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
 }
 
-% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
-
-\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+%%% Untyped variables:
 
-% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
-% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
-\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+% @defvr category var args
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
 
-% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
-% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup
-\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
-%               at least some C++ text from working
-\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
-\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
 
-% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
 
-\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
-
-\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+%%% Type:
+% @deftp category name args
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
 }
 
-% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
-
-\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
 
-\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
 %
-\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
-\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
 %
-\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
-\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
-\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  %
+  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+  %
+  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+  % The continuations:
+  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
+  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
+  %
+  % Put the type name to the right margin.
+  \noindent
+  \hbox to 0pt{%
+    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+    \kern\leftskip
+    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {%
+    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
+    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
+    \df \tt
+    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
+    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+    #3% output function name
+  }%
+  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+  %
+  \boldbrax
+  % arguments will be output next, if any.
 }
 
-% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
 %
-\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
-  \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
-                       \deftypeopcategory}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
-            {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
-    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
-  \endgroup
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+  % tt for the names.
+  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+  %
+  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
+  \let\var=\ttslanted
+  #1%
+  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
 }
 
-% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
 %
-\def\deftypemethod{%
-  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
-    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
-  \endgroup
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+  \catcode`\&=\active
 }
 
-% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
-%
-\def\deftypeivar{%
-  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
-\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
-  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
-            {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
-    \defvarargs{#3}%
-  \endgroup
-}
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
 
-% @defmethod == @defop Method
-%
-\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
-\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
-    \defunargs{#3}%
-  \endgroup
-}
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+  \activeparens
+  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+  \global\let& = \&
 
-% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
 
-\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
-\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+\newcount\parencount
 
-\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
-\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
-\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+  \ifampseen
+    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+    % otherwise use the default font.
+    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+  \else
+    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+    \sf
+  \fi
 }
-
-% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
-%
-\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
-%
-\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
-  \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
-    \defvarargs{#3}%
-  \endgroup
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+  \ifampseen
+    \ifnum\parencount=1
+      #1%
+    \fi
+  \fi
 }
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
 
-% @defvar
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
-% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
-% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
-\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
-
-% @defvr Counter foo-count
-
-\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
-
-\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
-
-% @defvar == @defvr Variable
-
-\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
-
-\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\def\opnr{%
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+  {\parenfont(}%
+  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
 }
-
-% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
-
-\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
-
-\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\def\clnr{%
+  {\parenfont)}%
+  \infirstlevel \sl
+  \global\advance\parencount by -1
 }
 
-% @deftypevar int foobar
-
-\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
-
-% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
-% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
-\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
-\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-\endgroup}
-\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
-
-\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
-
-\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-\endgroup}
-
-% Now define @deftp
-% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
-
-\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
-
-% @deftp Class window height width ...
-
-\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
-
-\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+  {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+  {\bf]}%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+}
 
-% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
-% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
-%
-\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
-\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
-\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
-\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
-\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
-\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+}
+\def\badparencount{%
+  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
+  \global\parencount=0
+}
+\def\badbrackcount{%
+  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
+  \global\brackcount=0
+}
 
 
 \message{macros,}
@@ -5178,42 +5636,69 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
- \newwrite\macscribble
- \def\scanmacro#1{%
-   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
-   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
-   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
-   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
-   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
-   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
-   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
-   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
-   \input \jobname.tmp
-   \endgroup
-}
-\else
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
-\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
-% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
-\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+  \newwrite\macscribble
+  \def\scantokens#1{%
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+    \input \jobname.tmp
+  }
 \fi
 
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \newlinechar`\^^M
+    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
+    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
+    % with macro expansion.                             --kasal, 19aug04
+    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
+    % ... and \example
+    \spaceisspace
+    %
+    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+    %
+    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
+    %                                                   --kasal, 29nov03
+    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
 \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
 \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
-\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
-                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% List of all defined macros in the form
+%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
+% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
+% if there is a need.
+\def\macrolist{}
+
+% Add the macro to \macrolist
+\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
+\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
+}
 
 % Utility routines.
-% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+% 
 \def\cslet#1#2{%
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\expandafter\let
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\csname#1\endcsname
-\csname#2\endcsname}
+  \expandafter\let
+  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+  \csname#2\endcsname
+}
 
 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
@@ -5226,7 +5711,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 }
 
 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
-{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
@@ -5240,30 +5725,36 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
 
+\def\scanctxt{%
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+}
+
 \def\macrobodyctxt{%
-  \catcode`\~=12
-  \catcode`\^=12
-  \catcode`\_=12
-  \catcode`\|=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\>=12
-  \catcode`\+=12
-  \catcode`\{=12
-  \catcode`\}=12
-  \catcode`\@=12
-  \catcode`\^^M=12
-  \usembodybackslash}
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \usembodybackslash
+}
 
 \def\macroargctxt{%
-  \catcode`\~=12
-  \catcode`\^=12
-  \catcode`\_=12
-  \catcode`\|=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\>=12
-  \catcode`\+=12
-  \catcode`\@=12
-  \catcode`\\=12}
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+}
 
 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
@@ -5294,42 +5785,39 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
      \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
-     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
-     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
-     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
-       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
   \fi
   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
   \fi}
 
-\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
-\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
-    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
     \begingroup
-      \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
-      \def\do##1{%
-        \def\tempb{##1}%
-        \ifx\tempa\tempb
-          % remove this
-        \else
-          \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
-          \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
-        \fi}%
-      \def\newmacrolist{}%
-      % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
-      \macrolist
-      \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
+      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
+      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
     \endgroup
   \else
     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
   \fi
 }
 
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+  \ifx #1\relax
+    % remove this
+  \else
+    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
@@ -5439,31 +5927,29 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
 % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
-\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
     \expandafter\parsearg
-  \fi \next}
-
-% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
-% expanded by \write.
-\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
-  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+  \fi \macnamexxx}
 
 
 % @alias.
 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
 % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
-\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
-           \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
+    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+  }%
+  \next
+}
 
 
 \message{cross references,}
-% @xref etc.
 
 \newwrite\auxfile
 
@@ -5475,56 +5961,68 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
 
-% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
-\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
-\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
-\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
 \let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\relax
-
-% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
-\def\donoderef{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
-    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
-      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
-  \fi
-}
-\def\unnumbnoderef{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
-    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
-  \fi
-}
-\def\appendixnoderef{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
-    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
-      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
   \fi
 }
 
-
 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
 %
 \newcount\savesfregister
-\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
-
-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
-% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
-% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
-% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
-% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{{%
-  \indexdummies
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
+%                 or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+%                 empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
-  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
-  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
-  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
-}}
+  \iflinks
+    {%
+      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+        \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+          ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+      }%
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
 
 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
@@ -5537,137 +6035,159 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
   \unsepspaces
   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
-  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
-  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
-      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
     \else
       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
-        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
       \else
         \ifhavexrefs
           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
-          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
         \else
           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
-          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
         \fi%
       \fi
     \fi
   \fi
   %
-  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
-  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
-  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
-  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
-  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
-  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  % Make link in pdf output.
   \ifpdf
     \leavevmode
     \getfilename{#4}%
-    {\normalturnoffactive
+    {\turnoffactive
+     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
+     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
+     %
      \ifnum\filenamelength>0
        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
+         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
      \else
        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-         goto name{#1}%
+         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
      \fi
     }%
     \linkcolor
   \fi
   %
-  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
+  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+  {%
+    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+  }%
+  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
+    \else
+      \printedrefname
+    \fi
+    %
+    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+    % "in MANUALNAME".
+    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \fi
   \else
-    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
-    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
-    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
-    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
-    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
-    {\normalturnoffactive
-     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
-     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
-     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
-     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
-    }%
-    % [mynode],
-    [\printednodename],\space
-    % page 3
-    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    %
+    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \else
+      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+      {\turnoffactive
+       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+      }%
+      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+      %
+      % But we always want a comma and a space:
+      ,\space
+      %
+      % output the `page 3'.
+      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+    \fi
   \fi
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
-% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
-
-% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
-% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
-\def\dosetq#1#2{%
-  {\let\folio=0%
-   \normalturnoffactive
-   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
-   \iflinks
-     \next
-   \fi
-  }%
-}
-
-% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
-% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
-% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
-
-\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
-
-% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
-
-\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
-
-\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
-
-\def\Ynothing{}
-
-\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
-\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
-\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
-\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
-\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
-\else %
-\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
-\fi \fi \fi }
-
-\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
-\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
-\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
-\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
-\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
-\else %
-\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
-\fi \fi \fi }
-
-\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
 
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+% Things referred to by \setref.
 %
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
-  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
-\else
-  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie
+      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
 
 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
-
+%
 \def\refx#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+  {%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \otherbackslash
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+      \csname XR#1\endcsname
+  }%
+  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
     % If not defined, say something at least.
     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
     \iflinks
@@ -5682,22 +6202,50 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
     \fi
   \else
     % It's defined, so just use it.
-    \csname X#1\endcsname
+    \thisrefX
   \fi
   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
 }
 
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
 %
-\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
-  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
-  \catcode`\\ = 0
-  \afterassignment\endgroup
-  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
+  %
+  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
+    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+    %
+    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+    \else
+      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+    % for later use in \listoffloats.
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
+  \fi
 }
 
 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
-\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \readdatafile{aux}%
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\setupdatafile{%
   \catcode`\^^@=\other
   \catcode`\^^A=\other
   \catcode`\^^B=\other
@@ -5725,9 +6273,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \catcode`\^^]=\other
   \catcode`\^^^=\other
   \catcode`\^^_=\other
-  \catcode`\@=\other
-  \catcode`\^=\other
-  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
@@ -5740,6 +6286,9 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
   %
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  %
+  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
   \catcode`\~=\other
   \catcode`\[=\other
   \catcode`\]=\other
@@ -5751,41 +6300,42 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \catcode`\$=\other
   \catcode`\#=\other
   \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`\%=\other
   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
-  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  %
+  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
+  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
+  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
   {%
-    \count 1=128
+    \count1=128
     \def\loop{%
-      \catcode\count 1=\other
-      \advance\count 1 by 1
-      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+      \catcode\count1=\other
+      \advance\count1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
     }%
   }%
-  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
-  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
-  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
-  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
-  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
-  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  %
+  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
   \catcode`\{=1
   \catcode`\}=2
-  \catcode`\%=\other
-  \catcode`\'=0
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  %
-  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
-  \ifeof 1 \else
-    \closein 1
-    \input \jobname.aux
-    \global\havexrefstrue
-    \global\warnedobstrue
-  \fi
-  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
-  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
-\endgroup}
+  \catcode`\@=0
+}
 
+\def\readdatafile#1{%
+\begingroup
+  \setupdatafile
+  \input\jobname.#1
+\endgroup}
 
-% Footnotes.
+\message{insertions,}
+% including footnotes.
 
 \newcount \footnoteno
 
@@ -5799,37 +6349,39 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
 
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
-
 {\catcode `\@=11
 %
 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
 \gdef\footnote{%
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
   %
   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
   \let\@sf\empty
-  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
   %
   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
   \unskip
   \thisfootno\@sf
-  \footnotezzz
+  \dofootnote
 }%
 
 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
 % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
 %
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
 % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
 %
-\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup
   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
   % So reset some parameters.
+  \hsize=\pagewidth
   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
@@ -5859,48 +6411,68 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \footstrut
   \futurelet\next\fo@t
 }
-\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
-  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
-\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
-\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
-\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
-
 }%end \catcode `\@=11
 
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
-% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
+% would be lost.
+% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
+
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+% out prematurely.
 %
-\def\|{%
-  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
-  \leavevmode
-  %
-  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
-  \vadjust{%
-    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
-    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
-    \vskip-\baselineskip
-    %
-    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
-    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
-    \llap{%
-      %
-      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
-      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
-      %
-      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
-      \hskip 12pt
-    }%
-  }%
+\def\startsavinginserts{%
+  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+    \let\insert\saveinsert
+  \else
+    \let\checkinserts\relax
+  \fi
 }
 
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
 %
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+\def\saveinsert#1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \afterassignment\next
+  % swallow the left brace
+  \let\temp =
+}
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+
+\def\placesaveins#1{%
+  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+    {\box#1}%
+}
+
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+{
+  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
+  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+}
+
+% initialization:
+\def\newsaveins #1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+    \checksaveins #1}%
+}
+
+% initialize:
+\let\checkinserts\empty
+\newsaveins\footins
+\newsaveins\margin
+
 
 % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
@@ -5910,12 +6482,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % undone and the next image would fail.
 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
 \ifeof 1 \else
-  \closein 1
-  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
-  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
   \input epsf.tex
 \fi
+\closein 1
 %
 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
@@ -5954,7 +6526,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
     % above and below.
     \nobreak\vskip\parskip
     \nobreak
-    \line\bgroup\hss
+    \line\bgroup
   \fi
   %
   % Output the image.
@@ -5967,10 +6539,275 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
     \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
   \fi
   %
-  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
+  \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
 \endgroup}
 
 
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
+%
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+%
+% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
+% be referable.
+%
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+%
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+% chapter-level command.
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+%
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  \let\thiscaption=\empty
+  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+  %
+  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    \def\floattype{#1}%
+    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+    %
+    \ifx\floattype\empty
+      \let\safefloattype=\empty
+    \else
+      {%
+        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+        \indexnofonts
+        \turnoffactive
+        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
+      %
+      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+      \global\advance\floatno by 1
+      %
+      {%
+        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
+        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+        % lists of floats.
+        %
+        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+    \vskip\parskip
+    %
+    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% we have these possibilities:
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
+% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
+% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
+% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
+% @float & no caption:
+%
+\def\Efloat{%
+    \let\floatident = \empty
+    %
+    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+    %
+    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
+      \fi
+      % the number.
+      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+    \let\captionline = \floatident
+    %
+    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+        \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+      \fi
+      %
+      % caption text.
+      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+      \vskip.5\parskip
+      \captionline
+      %
+      % Space below caption.
+      \vskip\parskip
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
+    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
+      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+      {%
+        \atdummies
+        %
+        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
+        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
+        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
+        \scanexp{%
+          \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
+            \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+              \thiscaption
+            \else
+              \thisshortcaption
+            \fi
+          }%
+        }%
+        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+          \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+  \egroup  % end of \vtop
+  %
+  % place the captured inserts
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
+  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
+  % float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+%
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}
+
+% @caption, @shortcaption
+%
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+\def\getfloatno#1{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+      %
+      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+  \fi
+  \let\floatno#1%
+}
+
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
+% first read the @float command.
+%
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
+% \thissection value which we \setref above.
+%
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+%
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
+% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
+%
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+}
+
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+%
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+  {%
+    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+    \ifhavexrefs
+      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \begingroup
+      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
+      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+%
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+% they won't appear in the aux file).
+%
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
+  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+  % in pdf output.
+  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+  %
+  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+  \writeentry
+}}
+
 \message{localization,}
 % and i18n.
 
@@ -5979,19 +6816,17 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
 %
-\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
-\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
-  % Read the file if it exists.
-  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
-  \ifeof1
-    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
-    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
-    \let\temp = \relax
-  \else
-    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
-  \fi
-  \temp
+    % Read the file if it exists.
+    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+    \ifeof 1
+      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+    \else
+      \input txi-#1.tex
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
   \endgroup
 }
 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
@@ -6036,12 +6871,14 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   \fi
 }
 
-% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
-% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  We also call
-% \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
-% The caller should also set \parskip.
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
+% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
+% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
+%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
 %
-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
   \voffset = #3\relax
   \topskip = #6\relax
   \splittopskip = \topskip
@@ -6060,55 +6897,88 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   \normaloffset = #4\relax
   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
   %
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+  \fi
+  %
   \setleading{\textleading}
   %
   \parindent = \defaultparindent
   \setemergencystretch
 }
 
-% Use `small' versions.
-%
-\def\smallenvironments{%
-  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
-  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
-  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
-  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
-}
-
 % @letterpaper (the default).
 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
   \textleading = 13.2pt
   %
   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
-  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+                    {11in}{8.5in}%
 }}
 
-% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
   \textleading = 12pt
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+                    {9.25in}{7in}%
   %
   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
   \tolerance = 700
   \hfuzz = 1pt
   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
-  \deftypemargin = 0pt
   \defbodyindent = .5cm
-  \smallenvironments
+}}
+
+% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
+% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
+\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
+  \textleading = 12pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
+                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
+                    {0pt}{14pt}%
+                    {9in}{6in}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .4cm
 }}
 
 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
-  \textleading = 12pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
+  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
+  % your texinfo source file like this:
+  % @tex
+  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+  % @end tex
+  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
   %
   \tolerance = 700
   \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 5mm
 }}
 
 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
@@ -6118,44 +6988,46 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
   \textleading = 12.5pt
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+                    {210mm}{148mm}%
   %
   \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
   \tolerance = 800
   \hfuzz = 1.2pt
-  \contentsrightmargin = 0mm
-  \deftypemargin = 0pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
   \defbodyindent = 2mm
   \tableindent = 12mm
-  %
-  \smallenvironments
 }}
 
-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
-% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \textleading = 13.6pt
-  %
   \afourpaper
-  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
   %
-  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
-  % although this does not entirely make sense.
+  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
   \globaldefs = 0
 }}
 
-% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
-\def\afourwide{%
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
   \afourpaper
-  \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
-}
+  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
 
 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
 %
-\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
-\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
   \globaldefs = 1
@@ -6163,7 +7035,16 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
   \setleading{\textleading}%
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  \dimen0 = #1
+  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+  %
+  \dimen2 = \hsize
+  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
 }}
 
 % Set default to letter.
@@ -6193,8 +7074,8 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 \def\normalplus{+}
 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
 
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
-% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
 %
 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
@@ -6226,8 +7107,9 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 \catcode`\_=\active
 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+\let\realunder=_
 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
 
 \catcode`\|=\active
 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
@@ -6241,15 +7123,6 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
 \catcode`\$=\active
 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-%\catcode 27=\active
-%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
-
-% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
-{\catcode`\==\active
-\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
-
-\catcode`+=\active
-\catcode`\_=\active
 
 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
@@ -6257,46 +7130,53 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
 
-\catcode`\@=0
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
+% parsing them.
+\def\turnoffactive{%
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  \otherbackslash
+}
 
-% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
-\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
-%{\catcode`\\=\other
-%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+\catcode`\@=0
 
-% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
-{\catcode`\\=\active
-@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
 
-% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
-\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
+% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
 
-% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
+% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
+% in fixed width font.
 \catcode`\\=\active
-
-% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
-% even after parsing them.
-@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
-@let\=@realbackslash
-@let~=@normaltilde
-@let^=@normalcaret
-@let_=@normalunderscore
-@let|=@normalverticalbar
-@let<=@normalless
-@let>=@normalgreater
-@let+=@normalplus
-@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-
-@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
-@let\=@normalbackslash
-@let~=@normaltilde
-@let^=@normalcaret
-@let_=@normalunderscore
-@let|=@normalverticalbar
-@let<=@normalless
-@let>=@normalgreater
-@let+=@normalplus
-@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
+% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
+%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
+
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'.
+% 
+@def@normalturnoffactive{%
+  @let\=@normalbackslash
+  @let"=@normaldoublequote
+  @let~=@normaltilde
+  @let^=@normalcaret
+  @let_=@normalunderscore
+  @let|=@normalverticalbar
+  @let<=@normalless
+  @let>=@normalgreater
+  @let+=@normalplus
+  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+  @unsepspaces
+}
 
 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
@@ -6310,9 +7190,9 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @global@let\ = @eatinput
 
 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
-% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
 %
 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
@@ -6329,10 +7209,6 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @catcode`@# = @other
 @catcode`@% = @other
 
-@c Set initial fonts.
-@textfonts
-@rm
-
 
 @c Local variables:
 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@@ -6342,6 +7218,8 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
 @c End:
 
+@c vim:sw=2:
+
 @ignore
    arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
 @end ignore